blob: a0d45413bd1d2aeaf9561b942126885cccc4ecc9 [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000014#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
15#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000016#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
18#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
19#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000021#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +000022#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000023#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000024#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000025#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000026#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000027#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000028#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
29#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
30#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
31#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
32#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
33#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
34#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
35#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
36#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
37#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
38#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000039#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000040#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000041#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000042#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000043#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000044#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
45#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000046#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000047#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000048#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000049#include <algorithm>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000050#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000051#include <set>
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000052using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000053using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000054
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000055#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
56
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000057// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
58// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
59// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
60// minimum reasonable default.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000061static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
62 "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
63 cl::desc(
64 "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
65
66static cl::opt<bool> DupRet(
67 "simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
68 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000069
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000070static cl::opt<bool>
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000071 SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
72 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000073
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +000074static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
75 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
76 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +000077
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000078static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
79 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
80 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
81 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
82 "predicated store"));
83
84static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
85 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
86 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
87 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
88
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +000089static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
90 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
91 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
92 "executed"));
93
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +000094static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
95 "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
96 cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
97 "speculatively executed instructions"));
98
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +000099STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000100STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
101 "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
102STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
103 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
104STATISTIC(
105 NumLookupTablesHoles,
106 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +0000107STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000108STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons,
109 "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000110STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000111
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000112namespace {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000113// The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
114// case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
115// cases composing the case group.
116typedef SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000117 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000118// The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
119// and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
120// switch for that PHI.
121typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> SwitchCaseResultsTy;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000122
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000123/// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
124struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
125 ConstantInt *Value;
126 BasicBlock *Dest;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000127
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000128 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000129 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
130
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000131 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
132 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
133 return Value < RHS.Value;
134 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000135
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000136 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
137};
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000138
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000139class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000140 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000141 const DataLayout &DL;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +0000142 unsigned BonusInstThreshold;
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +0000143 AssumptionCache *AC;
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000144 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000145 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000146 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
147 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000148 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000149 BasicBlock *Pred,
150 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000151 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
152 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000153
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000154 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000155 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +0000156 bool SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
157 bool SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000158 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000159 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000160 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000161 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000162 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
163 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000164
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000165public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000166 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000167 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC,
168 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders)
169 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), BonusInstThreshold(BonusInstThreshold), AC(AC),
170 LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders) {}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000171 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
172};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000173}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000174
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000175/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000176/// terminator instructions together.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000177static bool SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000178 if (SI1 == SI2)
179 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000180
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000181 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
182 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
183 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
184 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
185 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000186 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000187
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000188 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
189 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
190 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000191 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
192 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
193 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB))
194 return false;
195 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000196
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000197 return true;
198}
199
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000200/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
201/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
202/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000203static bool
204isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1, BranchInst *SI2,
205 Instruction *Cond,
206 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode *> &PhiNodes) {
207 if (SI1 == SI2)
208 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000209 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
210
211 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000212 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000213 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
214 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
215 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
216 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000217 if (!Ci2)
218 return false;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000219 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
220 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
221 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
222 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
223 return false;
224
225 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
226 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000227 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000228 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
229 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
230 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000231 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
232 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000233 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000234 return false;
235 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
236 }
237 return true;
238}
239
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000240/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
241/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
242/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
243/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000244static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
245 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000246 if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin()))
247 return; // Quick exit if nothing to do
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000248
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000249 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000250 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin(); (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I)
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000251 PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000252}
253
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000254/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
255/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
256/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000257/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000258static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000259 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000260 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000261 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000262 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000263}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000264
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000265/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
266/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000267/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
268/// which works well enough for us.
269///
270/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000271/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
272/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
273/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
274/// set and true is returned.
275///
276/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
277/// Select whose cost is 2.
278///
279/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
280/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
281/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000282static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000283 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000284 unsigned &CostRemaining,
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000285 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
286 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000287 // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
288 // so limit the recursion depth.
289 // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
290 // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
291 if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
292 return false;
293
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000294 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000295 if (!I) {
296 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
297 // can be executed unconditionally.
298 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
299 if (C->canTrap())
300 return false;
301 return true;
302 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000303 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000304
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000305 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000306 // the bottom of this block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000307 if (PBB == BB)
308 return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000309
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000310 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
311 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000312 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
313 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000314 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000315 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000316
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000317 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
318 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000319 if (!AggressiveInsts)
320 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000321
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000322 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000323 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I))
324 return true;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000325
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000326 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
327 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
328 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000329 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000330 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000331
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000332 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000333
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000334 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
335 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
336 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
337 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
338 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
339 // enabled further IR optimizations.
340 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
341 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts->empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000342 return false;
343
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000344 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
345 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000346
347 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
348 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000349 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000350 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
351 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000352 return false;
353 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
354 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000355 return true;
356}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000357
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000358/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000359/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000360static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000361 // Normal constant int.
362 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000363 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000364 return CI;
365
366 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
367 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000368 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000369
370 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
371 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
372 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
373
374 // IntToPtr const int.
375 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
376 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
377 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
378 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
379 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
380 return CI;
381 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000382 return cast<ConstantInt>(
383 ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000384 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000385 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000386}
387
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000388namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000389
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000390/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
391/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
392/// structure.
393/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
394/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
395/// representing the different cases for the switch.
396/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
397/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
398/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
399/// fail.
400struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000401 const DataLayout &DL;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000402 Value *CompValue; /// Value found for the switch comparison
403 Value *Extra; /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
404 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals; /// Set of integers to match in switch
405 unsigned UsedICmps; /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000406
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000407 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000408 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL)
409 : DL(DL), CompValue(nullptr), Extra(nullptr), UsedICmps(0) {
410 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000411 }
412
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000413 /// Prevent copy
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000414 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000415 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000416 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000417
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000418private:
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000419 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
420 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
421 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000422 if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
423 return false;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000424 CompValue = NewVal;
425 return (CompValue != nullptr);
426 }
427
428 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
429 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
430 /// match depending on isEQ).
431 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
432 /// against is placed in CompValue.
433 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
434 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000435 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000436 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
437 ICmpInst *ICI;
438 ConstantInt *C;
439 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000440 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000441 return false;
442 }
443
444 Value *RHSVal;
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000445 const APInt *RHSC;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000446
447 // Pattern match a special case
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000448 // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000449 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000450 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000451
452 // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
453 // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
454
455 /*
456 ONE : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
457 x : BITVECTOR(64);
458 y : BITVECTOR(64);
459 z : BITVECTOR(64);
460 mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
461 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
462 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
463 );
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000464 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
465 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
466 );
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000467 */
468
469 // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
470 // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
471 // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
472 // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
473 // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
474 // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
475 // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
476
477 // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
478 // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
479 //
480 // mask = (1 << z)
481 // (x & ~mask) == y --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
482 //
483 // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
484 // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
485
486 // Pattern match a special case:
487 /*
488 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
489 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
490 );
491 */
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000492 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000493 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
494 APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000495 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000496 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000497 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000498 return false;
499
500 Vals.push_back(C);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000501 Vals.push_back(
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000502 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
503 C->getValue() | Mask));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000504 UsedICmps++;
505 return true;
506 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000507 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000508
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000509 // Pattern match a special case:
510 /*
511 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
512 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
513 );
514 */
515 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
516 m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
517 APInt Mask = *RHSC;
518 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
519 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
520 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
521 return false;
522
523 Vals.push_back(C);
524 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
525 C->getValue() & ~Mask));
526 UsedICmps++;
527 return true;
528 }
529 }
530
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000531 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000532 if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000533 return false;
534
535 UsedICmps++;
536 Vals.push_back(C);
537 return ICI->getOperand(0);
538 }
539
540 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000541 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
542 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000543
544 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
545 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
546 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000547 if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
548 Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000549 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
550 }
551
552 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
553 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
554 // x != 0 && x != 1.
555 if (!isEQ)
556 Span = Span.inverse();
557
558 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
559 if (Span.getSetSize().ugt(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
560 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000561 }
562
563 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000564 if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000565 return false;
566
567 // Add all values from the range to the set
568 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
569 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000570
571 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000572 return true;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000573 }
574
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000575 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000576 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
577 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
578 /// vector.
579 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000580 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000581 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
582 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000583
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000584 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
585 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000586 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000587
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000588 // Initialize
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000589 Visited.insert(V);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000590 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000591
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000592 while (!DFT.empty()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000593 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000594
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000595 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
596 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
597 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000598 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(1)).second)
599 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
600 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(0)).second)
601 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000602 continue;
603 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000604
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000605 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000606 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000607 // Match succeed, continue the loop
608 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000609 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000610
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000611 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
612 // comparison against the same value as the others.
613 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
614 if (!Extra) {
615 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000616 continue;
617 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000618 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
619 CompValue = nullptr;
620 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000621 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000622 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000623};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000624}
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000625
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000626static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000627 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000628 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
629 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
630 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
631 if (BI->isConditional())
632 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000633 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
634 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000635 }
636
637 TI->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000638 if (Cond)
639 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000640}
641
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000642/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000643/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000644Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000645 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000646 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
647 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
648 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000649 if (SI->getNumSuccessors() * std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
650 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <=
651 128)
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000652 CV = SI->getCondition();
653 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000654 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000655 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000656 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000657 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000658 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000659
660 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000661 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000662 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
663 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000664 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000665 CV = Ptr;
666 }
667 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000668 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000669}
670
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000671/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000672/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000673BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
674 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000675 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000676 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000677 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;
678 ++i)
679 Cases.push_back(
680 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(i.getCaseValue(), i.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000681 return SI->getDefaultDest();
682 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000683
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000684 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000685 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000686 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000687 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
688 GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000689 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000690}
691
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000692/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000693/// in the list that match the specified block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000694static void
695EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
696 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000697 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000698}
699
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000700/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000701static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
702 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000703 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
704
705 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
706 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
707 std::swap(V1, V2);
708
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000709 if (V1->size() == 0)
710 return false;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000711 if (V1->size() == 1) {
712 // Just scan V2.
713 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
714 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
715 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
716 return true;
717 }
718
719 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
720 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
721 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
722 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
723 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
724 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
725 return true;
726 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
727 ++i1;
728 else
729 ++i2;
730 }
731 return false;
732}
733
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000734/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
735/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
736/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
737/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
738/// very limited form of jump threading.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000739bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
740 TerminatorInst *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000741 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000742 if (!PredVal)
743 return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000744
745 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
746 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000747 if (ThisVal != PredVal)
748 return false; // Different predicates.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000749
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000750 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
751 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
752
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000753 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000754 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000755 BasicBlock *PredDef =
756 GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
757 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000758
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000759 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000760 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000761 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000762 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000763
764 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
765 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
766 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
767 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
768 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
769 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000770 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000771 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000772
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000773 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
774 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
775 // uncond br.
776 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
777 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000778 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000779 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000780
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000781 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000782 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000783
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000784 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000785 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
786 << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000787
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000788 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
789 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000790 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000791
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000792 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
793 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000794 SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000795 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
796 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000797
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000798 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000799 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000800
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000801 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
802 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000803 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000804 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
805 if (HasWeight)
806 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
807 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000808 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000809 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
810 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000811 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
812 --i;
813 if (DeadCases.count(i.getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000814 if (HasWeight) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000815 std::swap(Weights[i.getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000816 Weights.pop_back();
817 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000818 i.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
819 SI->removeCase(i);
820 }
821 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000822 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000823 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000824 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
825 .createBranchWeights(Weights));
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000826
827 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000828 return true;
829 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000830
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000831 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
832 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000833 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000834 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000835 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
836 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000837 if (TIV)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000838 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000839 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
840 }
841 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000842
843 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
844 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000845 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000846 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
847 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
848 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
849 break;
850 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000851
852 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000853 if (!TheRealDest)
854 TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000855
856 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
857 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000858 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
859 if (Succ != CheckEdge)
860 Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000861 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000862 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000863
864 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000865 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000866 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000867
868 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000869 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
870 << "\n");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000871
872 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
873 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000874}
875
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000876namespace {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000877/// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
878/// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
879/// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
880struct ConstantIntOrdering {
881 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
882 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
883 }
884};
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000885}
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000886
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000887static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
888 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
889 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
890 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000891 if (LHS == RHS)
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000892 return 0;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000893 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000894}
895
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000896static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000897 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000898 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000899 if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000900 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
901
902 return false;
903}
904
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000905/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
906/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
907/// metadata.
908static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
909 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000910 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000911 assert(MD);
912 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000913 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000914 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000915 }
916
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000917 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
918 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
919 // default weight to be the first entry.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000920 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000921 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
922 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
923 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
924 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000925 }
926}
927
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +0000928/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000929static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000930 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
931 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
932 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
933 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
934 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000935 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000936}
937
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000938/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
939/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000940/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
941/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000942bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
943 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000944 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000945 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000946 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
947 bool Changed = false;
948
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000949 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000950 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000951 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000952
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000953 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
954 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000955 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000956
957 if (PCV == CV && SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI)) {
958 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000959 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000960 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
961
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000962 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000963 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
964
965 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
966 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
967 // build.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000968 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000969
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000970 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
971 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000972 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
973 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
974
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000975 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000976 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000977 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000978 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
979 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
980 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000981 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
982 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
983 // successor's weights
984 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000985
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000986 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000987 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000988 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000989 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000990 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
991 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
992 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000993 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000994
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000995 if (PredDefault == BB) {
996 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
997 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000998 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000999 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1000 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
1001 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1002 else {
1003 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
1004 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001005
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001006 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1007 // Increase weight for the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001008 Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
1009 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001010 Weights.pop_back();
1011 }
1012
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001013 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001014 --i;
1015 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001016 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001017
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001018 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001019 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
1020 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
1021 PredDefault = BBDefault;
1022 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
1023 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001024
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001025 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
1026 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001027 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1028 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
1029 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
1030 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1031 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001032 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1033 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
1034 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
1035 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001036 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
1037 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001038 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001039 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001040
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001041 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1042 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
1043 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
1044 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
1045 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
1046 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
1047 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
1048 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001049 } else {
1050 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
1051 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
1052 // activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001053 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1054 std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001055 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1056 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
1057 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001058
1059 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001060 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
1061 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001062 Weights.pop_back();
1063 }
1064
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001065 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1066 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001067 --i;
1068 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001069 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001070
1071 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
1072 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001073 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1074 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
1075 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001076 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1077 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001078 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1079 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001080 PTIHandled.erase(
1081 BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001082 }
1083
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001084 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1085 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001086 for (ConstantInt *I : PTIHandled) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001087 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001088 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[I]);
1089 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001090 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001091 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001092 }
1093
1094 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
1095 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1096 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001097 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1098 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001099
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001100 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001101 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001102 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001103 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001104 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001105 }
1106
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001107 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001108 SwitchInst *NewSI =
1109 Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001110 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001111 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1112 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001113
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001114 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1115 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1116 FitWeights(Weights);
1117
1118 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1119
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001120 NewSI->setMetadata(
1121 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
1122 MDBuilder(BB->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001123 }
1124
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001125 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001126
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001127 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1128 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1129 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001130 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001131 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1132 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001133 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001134 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001135 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001136 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop",
1137 BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001138 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001139 }
1140 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1141 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001142
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001143 Changed = true;
1144 }
1145 }
1146 return Changed;
1147}
1148
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001149// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1150// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1151// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001152static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1153 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001154 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001155 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001156 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001157 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1158 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1159 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001160 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001161 return false;
1162 }
1163 }
1164 }
1165 return true;
1166}
1167
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001168static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1169
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001170/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1171/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1172/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001173static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001174 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001175 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1176 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1177 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1178 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1179 // identical order.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001180 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1181 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001182
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001183 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1184 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1185
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001186 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001187 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1188 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1189 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1190 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1191 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001192 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001193 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001194 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001195 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001196 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001197 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001198 return false;
1199
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001200 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001201
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001202 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001203 do {
1204 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1205 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1206 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1207 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001208
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001209 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1210 return Changed;
1211
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001212 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1213 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1214 // the now redundant second instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001215 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001216 if (!I2->use_empty())
1217 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Dan Gohmanc8a27f22009-08-25 22:11:20 +00001218 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001219 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1220 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1221 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1222 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1223 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
1224 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1225 LLVMContext::MD_align,
1226 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1227 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
1228 LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access};
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001229 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001230 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001231 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001232
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001233 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1234 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001235 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1236 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1237 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1238 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1239 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001240 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001241 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001242 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001243 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001244 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001245
1246 return true;
1247
1248HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001249 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1250 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001251 return Changed;
1252
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001253 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001254 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001255 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001256 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1257 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1258 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1259 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1260 continue;
1261
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001262 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1263 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
1264 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, PN) ||
1265 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, PN))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001266 return Changed;
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001267
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001268 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001269 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001270 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001271 return Changed;
1272 }
1273 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001274
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001275 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001276 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001277 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001278 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001279 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1280 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001281 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001282 }
1283
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001284 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001285 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1286 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1287 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1288 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001289 std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001290 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001291 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001292 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Chris Lattner01944572004-11-30 07:47:34 +00001293 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001294 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1295 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001296 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1297 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001298
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001299 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1300 // that determines the right value.
1301 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001302 if (!SI)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001303 SI = cast<SelectInst>(
1304 Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1305 BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001306
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001307 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1308 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1309 if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1310 PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001311 }
1312 }
1313
1314 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001315 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1))
1316 AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001317
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001318 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001319 return true;
1320}
1321
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001322// Is it legal to place a variable in operand \c OpIdx of \c I?
1323// FIXME: This should be promoted to Instruction.
1324static bool canReplaceOperandWithVariable(const Instruction *I,
1325 unsigned OpIdx) {
1326 // Early exit.
1327 if (!isa<Constant>(I->getOperand(OpIdx)))
1328 return true;
1329
1330 switch (I->getOpcode()) {
1331 default:
1332 return true;
1333 case Instruction::Call:
1334 case Instruction::Invoke:
1335 // FIXME: many arithmetic intrinsics have no issue taking a
1336 // variable, however it's hard to distingish these from
1337 // specials such as @llvm.frameaddress that require a constant.
1338 return !isa<IntrinsicInst>(I);
1339 case Instruction::ShuffleVector:
1340 // Shufflevector masks are constant.
1341 return OpIdx != 2;
1342 case Instruction::ExtractValue:
1343 case Instruction::InsertValue:
1344 // All operands apart from the first are constant.
1345 return OpIdx == 0;
1346 case Instruction::Alloca:
1347 return false;
1348 case Instruction::GetElementPtr:
1349 if (OpIdx == 0)
1350 return true;
1351 gep_type_iterator It = std::next(gep_type_begin(I), OpIdx - 1);
1352 return !It->isStructTy();
1353 }
1354}
1355
James Molloy55bd04c2016-08-31 10:46:23 +00001356// All instructions in Insts belong to different blocks that all unconditionally
1357// branch to a common successor. Analyze each instruction and return true if it
1358// would be possible to sink them into their successor, creating one common
1359// instruction instead. For every value that would be required to be provided by
1360// PHI node (because an operand varies in each input block), add to PHIOperands.
1361static bool canSinkInstructions(
1362 ArrayRef<Instruction *> Insts,
1363 DenseMap<Instruction *, SmallVector<Value *, 4>> &PHIOperands) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001364 // Prune out obviously bad instructions to move. Any non-store instruction
1365 // must have exactly one use, and we check later that use is by a single,
1366 // common PHI instruction in the successor.
1367 for (auto *I : Insts) {
1368 // These instructions may change or break semantics if moved.
1369 if (isa<PHINode>(I) || I->isEHPad() || isa<AllocaInst>(I) ||
1370 I->getType()->isTokenTy())
1371 return false;
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001372 // Everything must have only one use too, apart from stores which
1373 // have no uses.
1374 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I) && !I->hasOneUse())
1375 return false;
1376 }
1377
1378 const Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1379 for (auto *I : Insts)
1380 if (!I->isSameOperationAs(I0))
1381 return false;
1382
James Molloy55bd04c2016-08-31 10:46:23 +00001383 // All instructions in Insts are known to be the same opcode. If they aren't
1384 // stores, check the only user of each is a PHI or in the same block as the
1385 // instruction, because if a user is in the same block as an instruction
1386 // we're contemplating sinking, it must already be determined to be sinkable.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001387 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1388 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
James Molloy55bd04c2016-08-31 10:46:23 +00001389 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
1390 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
1391 return U == PNUse || U->getParent() == I->getParent();
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001392 }))
1393 return false;
1394 }
1395
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001396 for (unsigned OI = 0, OE = I0->getNumOperands(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
1397 if (I0->getOperand(OI)->getType()->isTokenTy())
1398 // Don't touch any operand of token type.
1399 return false;
1400 auto SameAsI0 = [&I0, OI](const Instruction *I) {
James Molloy55bd04c2016-08-31 10:46:23 +00001401 assert(I->getNumOperands() == I0->getNumOperands());
1402 return I->getOperand(OI) == I0->getOperand(OI);
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001403 };
1404 if (!all_of(Insts, SameAsI0)) {
1405 if (!canReplaceOperandWithVariable(I0, OI))
1406 // We can't create a PHI from this GEP.
1407 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001408 // Don't create indirect calls! The called value is the final operand.
1409 if ((isa<CallInst>(I0) || isa<InvokeInst>(I0)) && OI == OE - 1) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001410 // FIXME: if the call was *already* indirect, we should do this.
1411 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001412 }
James Molloy55bd04c2016-08-31 10:46:23 +00001413 for (auto *I : Insts)
1414 PHIOperands[I].push_back(I->getOperand(OI));
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001415 }
1416 }
1417 return true;
1418}
1419
1420// Assuming canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks) has returned true, sink the last
1421// instruction of every block in Blocks to their common successor, commoning
1422// into one instruction.
1423static void sinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001424 auto *BBEnd = Blocks[0]->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1425
1426 // canSinkLastInstruction returning true guarantees that every block has at
1427 // least one non-terminator instruction.
1428 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1429 for (auto *BB : Blocks)
1430 Insts.push_back(BB->getTerminator()->getPrevNode());
1431
1432 // We don't need to do any checking here; canSinkLastInstruction should have
1433 // done it all for us.
1434 Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1435 SmallVector<Value*, 4> NewOperands;
1436 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O) {
1437 // This check is different to that in canSinkLastInstruction. There, we
1438 // cared about the global view once simplifycfg (and instcombine) have
1439 // completed - it takes into account PHIs that become trivially
1440 // simplifiable. However here we need a more local view; if an operand
1441 // differs we create a PHI and rely on instcombine to clean up the very
1442 // small mess we may make.
1443 bool NeedPHI = any_of(Insts, [&I0, O](const Instruction *I) {
1444 return I->getOperand(O) != I0->getOperand(O);
1445 });
1446 if (!NeedPHI) {
1447 NewOperands.push_back(I0->getOperand(O));
1448 continue;
1449 }
1450
1451 // Create a new PHI in the successor block and populate it.
1452 auto *Op = I0->getOperand(O);
1453 assert(!Op->getType()->isTokenTy() && "Can't PHI tokens!");
1454 auto *PN = PHINode::Create(Op->getType(), Insts.size(),
1455 Op->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
1456 for (auto *I : Insts)
1457 PN->addIncoming(I->getOperand(O), I->getParent());
1458 NewOperands.push_back(PN);
1459 }
1460
1461 // Arbitrarily use I0 as the new "common" instruction; remap its operands
1462 // and move it to the start of the successor block.
1463 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O)
1464 I0->getOperandUse(O).set(NewOperands[O]);
1465 I0->moveBefore(&*BBEnd->getFirstInsertionPt());
1466
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001467 // Update metadata.
1468 for (auto *I : Insts)
1469 if (I != I0)
1470 combineMetadataForCSE(I0, I);
1471
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001472 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1473 // canSinkLastInstruction checked that all instructions were used by
1474 // one and only one PHI node. Find that now, RAUW it to our common
1475 // instruction and nuke it.
1476 assert(I0->hasOneUse());
1477 auto *PN = cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1478 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(I0);
1479 PN->eraseFromParent();
1480 }
1481
1482 // Finally nuke all instructions apart from the common instruction.
1483 for (auto *I : Insts)
1484 if (I != I0)
1485 I->eraseFromParent();
1486}
1487
James Molloy55bd04c2016-08-31 10:46:23 +00001488namespace {
1489 // LockstepReverseIterator - Iterates through instructions
1490 // in a set of blocks in reverse order from the first non-terminator.
1491 // For example (assume all blocks have size n):
1492 // LockstepReverseIterator I([B1, B2, B3]);
1493 // *I-- = [B1[n], B2[n], B3[n]];
1494 // *I-- = [B1[n-1], B2[n-1], B3[n-1]];
1495 // *I-- = [B1[n-2], B2[n-2], B3[n-2]];
1496 // ...
1497 class LockstepReverseIterator {
1498 ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks;
1499 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1500 bool Fail;
1501 public:
1502 LockstepReverseIterator(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) :
1503 Blocks(Blocks) {
1504 reset();
1505 }
1506
1507 void reset() {
1508 Fail = false;
1509 Insts.clear();
1510 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
1511 if (BB->size() <= 1) {
1512 // Block wasn't big enough
1513 Fail = true;
1514 return;
1515 }
1516 Insts.push_back(BB->getTerminator()->getPrevNode());
1517 }
1518 }
1519
1520 bool isValid() const {
1521 return !Fail;
1522 }
1523
1524 void operator -- () {
1525 if (Fail)
1526 return;
1527 for (auto *&Inst : Insts) {
1528 if (Inst == &Inst->getParent()->front()) {
1529 Fail = true;
1530 return;
1531 }
1532 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
1533 }
1534 }
1535
1536 ArrayRef<Instruction*> operator * () const {
1537 return Insts;
1538 }
1539 };
1540}
1541
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001542/// Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd,
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001543/// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor
1544/// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code
1545/// in the two predecessors to BBEnd.
1546static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) {
1547 assert(BI1->isUnconditional());
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001548 BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0);
1549
James Molloy55bd04c2016-08-31 10:46:23 +00001550 // We currently only support branch targets with two predecessors.
1551 // FIXME: this is an arbitrary restriction and should be lifted.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001552 SmallVector<BasicBlock*,4> Blocks;
1553 for (auto *BB : predecessors(BBEnd))
1554 Blocks.push_back(BB);
1555 if (Blocks.size() != 2 ||
1556 !all_of(Blocks, [](const BasicBlock *BB) {
1557 auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
1558 return BI && BI->isUnconditional();
1559 }))
James Molloy475f4a72016-08-22 18:13:12 +00001560 return false;
James Molloy475f4a72016-08-22 18:13:12 +00001561
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001562 bool Changed = false;
James Molloy55bd04c2016-08-31 10:46:23 +00001563
1564 // We take a two-step approach to tail sinking. First we scan from the end of
1565 // each block upwards in lockstep. If the n'th instruction from the end of each
1566 // block can be sunk, those instructions are added to ValuesToSink and we
1567 // carry on. If we can sink an instruction but need to PHI-merge some operands
1568 // (because they're not identical in each instruction) we add these to
1569 // PHIOperands.
1570 unsigned ScanIdx = 0;
1571 SmallPtrSet<Value*,4> InstructionsToSink;
1572 DenseMap<Instruction*, SmallVector<Value*,4>> PHIOperands;
1573 LockstepReverseIterator LRI(Blocks);
1574 while (LRI.isValid() &&
1575 canSinkInstructions(*LRI, PHIOperands)) {
1576 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: instruction can be sunk: " << (*LRI)[0] << "\n");
1577 InstructionsToSink.insert((*LRI).begin(), (*LRI).end());
1578 ++ScanIdx;
1579 --LRI;
1580 }
1581
1582 // Now that we've analyzed all potential sinking candidates, perform the
1583 // actual sink. We iteratively sink the last non-terminator of the source
1584 // blocks into their common successor unless doing so would require too
1585 // many PHI instructions to be generated (currently only one PHI is allowed
1586 // per sunk instruction).
1587 //
1588 // We can use InstructionsToSink to discount values needing PHI-merging that will
1589 // actually be sunk in a later iteration. This allows us to be more
1590 // aggressive in what we sink. This does allow a false positive where we
1591 // sink presuming a later value will also be sunk, but stop half way through
1592 // and never actually sink it which means we produce more PHIs than intended.
1593 // This is unlikely in practice though.
1594 for (unsigned SinkIdx = 0; SinkIdx != ScanIdx; ++SinkIdx) {
1595 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Sink: "
1596 << *Blocks[0]->getTerminator()->getPrevNode()
1597 << "\n");
1598 // Because we've sunk every instruction in turn, the current instruction to
1599 // sink is always at index 0.
1600 LRI.reset();
1601 unsigned NumPHIdValues = 0;
1602 for (auto *I : *LRI)
1603 for (auto *V : PHIOperands[I])
1604 if (InstructionsToSink.count(V) == 0)
1605 ++NumPHIdValues;
1606 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: #phid values: " << NumPHIdValues << "\n");
1607 assert((NumPHIdValues % Blocks.size() == 0) &&
1608 "Every operand must either be PHId or not PHId!");
1609
1610 if (NumPHIdValues / Blocks.size() > 1)
1611 // Too many PHIs would be created.
1612 break;
1613
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001614 sinkLastInstruction(Blocks);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001615 NumSinkCommons++;
1616 Changed = true;
1617 }
James Molloy55bd04c2016-08-31 10:46:23 +00001618
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001619 return Changed;
1620}
1621
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001622/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1623/// conditional block.
1624///
1625/// We are looking for code like the following:
1626/// BrBB:
1627/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1628/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1629/// ... // function).
1630/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1631/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1632/// ThenBB:
1633/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1634/// br label EndBB
1635/// EndBB:
1636/// ...
1637/// We are going to transform this into:
1638/// BrBB:
1639/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1640/// ... //
1641/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1642/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1643/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1644/// ...
1645///
1646/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1647/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001648static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1649 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001650 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1651 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001652 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001653
1654 // Volatile or atomic.
1655 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001656 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001657
1658 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1659
1660 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001661 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001662 for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(*BrBB)) {
1663 if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
1664 break;
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001665 // Skip debug info.
1666 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CurI))
1667 continue;
1668 --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001669
David L Kreitzer96674172016-08-12 21:06:53 +00001670 // Could be calling an instruction that affects memory like free().
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001671 if (CurI.mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001672 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001673
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001674 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
1675 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1676 if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1677 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1678 return SI->getValueOperand();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001679 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001680 }
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001681 }
1682
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001683 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001684}
1685
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001686/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001687///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001688/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1689/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1690/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1691/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1692/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1693///
1694/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1695/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1696/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1697/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1698///
1699///
1700/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1701/// \code
1702/// BB:
1703/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1704/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1705/// ThenBB:
1706/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001707/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001708/// EndBB:
1709/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1710/// ...
1711/// \endcode
1712///
1713/// Into this IR:
1714/// \code
1715/// BB:
1716/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1717/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1718/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1719/// ...
1720/// \endcode
1721///
1722/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001723static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001724 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001725 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1726 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1727 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1728 return false;
1729
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001730 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1731 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1732
1733 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1734 // to swap the select operands later.
1735 bool Invert = false;
1736 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1737 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1738 Invert = true;
1739 }
1740 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1741
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001742 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1743 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1744 // - They are defined in BB, and
1745 // - They have no side effects, and
1746 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1747 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1748
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001749 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001750 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1751 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001752 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001753 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001754 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001755 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001756 // Skip debug info.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001757 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1758 continue;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001759
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001760 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001761 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001762 ++SpeculationCost;
1763 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001764 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001765
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001766 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001767 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1768 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1769 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001770 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001771 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001772 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1773 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001774 return false;
1775
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001776 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1777 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1778 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1779
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001780 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001781 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001782 // being sunk into the use block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001783 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001784 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001785 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001786 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1787
1788 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001789 }
1790 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001791
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001792 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1793 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
1794 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001795 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
1796 I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
1797 E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001798 I != E; ++I)
1799 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001800 ++SpeculationCost;
1801 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001802 return false;
1803 }
1804
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001805 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
1806 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001807 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001808 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001809 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
1810 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001811
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001812 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001813 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001814 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001815 continue;
1816
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001817 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
1818 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, PN) ||
1819 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, PN))
1820 return false;
1821
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001822 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001823 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
1824 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
1825 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001826 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
1827
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001828 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
1829 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001830 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001831 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
1832 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001833 unsigned MaxCost =
1834 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001835 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001836 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001837
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00001838 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
1839 // getting expanded into Instructions.
1840 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001841 // constant expression.
1842 ++SpeculationCost;
1843 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001844 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001845 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001846
1847 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
1848 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001849 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001850 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001851
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001852 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001853 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001854
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001855 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
1856 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001857 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001858 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
1859 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
1860 if (Invert)
1861 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patel796db352016-03-26 23:30:50 +00001862 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
1863 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001864 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
1865 }
1866
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00001867 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
1868 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001869 for (auto &I : *ThenBB)
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00001870 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
1871
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001872 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001873 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
1874 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001875
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001876 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001877 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001878 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
1879 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
1880 unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
1881 unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
1882 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI);
1883 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI);
1884
1885 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
1886 if (OrigV == ThenV)
1887 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001888
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001889 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001890 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
1891 // destinations were inverted.
1892 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001893 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001894 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patelf11ab052016-04-15 15:32:12 +00001895 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(
1896 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001897 PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
1898 PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001899 }
1900
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001901 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001902 return true;
1903}
1904
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001905/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001906static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
1907 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001908 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001909
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00001910 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001911 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
1912 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001913 if (Size > 10)
1914 return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001915 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001916
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001917 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001918 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00001919 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
1920 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001921 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
1922 return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001923 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001924
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001925 // Looks ok, continue checking.
1926 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001927
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001928 return true;
1929}
1930
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001931/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
1932/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
1933/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001934static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001935 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1936 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00001937 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
1938 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001939 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
1940 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001941
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001942 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
1943 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00001944 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001945 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001946 }
1947
1948 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001949 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
1950 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001951
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00001952 // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
David Majnemer0a16c222016-08-11 21:15:00 +00001953 if (any_of(*BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00001954 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I);
1955 return CI && (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent());
1956 }))
1957 return false;
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00001958
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001959 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
1960 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001961 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001962 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001963 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1))
1964 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001965
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001966 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
1967 // branch to RealDest.
1968 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
1969 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001970
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001971 if (RealDest == BB)
1972 continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001973 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001974 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()))
1975 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001976
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001977 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
1978 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
1979 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
1980 // the edge we are about to create.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001981 BasicBlock *EdgeBB =
1982 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), RealDest->getName() + ".critedge",
1983 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001984 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001985
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00001986 // Update PHI nodes.
1987 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001988
1989 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
1990 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
1991 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
1992 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001993 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001994 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
1995 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
1996 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
1997 continue;
1998 }
1999 // Clone the instruction.
2000 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002001 if (BBI->hasName())
2002 N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002003
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002004 // Update operands due to translation.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002005 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
2006 DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002007 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
2008 *i = PI->second;
2009 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002010
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002011 // Check for trivial simplification.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002012 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, DL)) {
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002013 if (!BBI->use_empty())
2014 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
2015 if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
2016 delete N; // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
2017 N = nullptr;
2018 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002019 } else {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002020 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002021 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002022 }
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002023 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
2024 if (N)
2025 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002026 }
2027
2028 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
2029 // to EdgeBB instead.
2030 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
2031 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
2032 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
2033 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
2034 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
2035 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002036
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002037 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002038 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002039 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002040
2041 return false;
2042}
2043
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002044/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
2045/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002046static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
2047 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002048 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
2049 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
2050 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
2051 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
2052 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
2053 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002054 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
2055 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
2056 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002057 if (!IfCond ||
2058 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
2059 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
2060 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002061
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00002062 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
2063 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
2064 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
2065 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
2066 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
2067 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2068 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
2069 if (NumPhis > 2)
2070 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002071
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002072 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
2073 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
2074 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002075 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00002076 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
2077 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002078 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
2079 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002080
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002081 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
2082 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002083 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002084 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002085 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002086 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002087 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002088
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002089 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002090 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002091 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002092 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002093 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002094 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002095
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00002096 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002097 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
2098 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002099 if (!PN)
2100 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002101
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002102 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
2103 // often be turned into switches and other things.
2104 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
2105 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
2106 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
2107 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
2108 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002109
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002110 // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
2111 // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
2112 // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
2113 // instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002114 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002115 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
2116 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
2117 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002118 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002119 } else {
2120 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002121 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2122 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002123 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002124 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002125 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2126 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002127 return false;
2128 }
2129 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002130
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002131 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002132 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002133 } else {
2134 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002135 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2136 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002137 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002138 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002139 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2140 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002141 return false;
2142 }
2143 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002144
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00002145 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002146 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002147
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002148 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
2149 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002150 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002151 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002152
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002153 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
2154 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002155 if (IfBlock1) {
2156 for (auto &I : *IfBlock1)
2157 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002158 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002159 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002160 IfBlock1->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002161 }
2162 if (IfBlock2) {
2163 for (auto &I : *IfBlock2)
2164 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002165 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002166 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002167 IfBlock2->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002168 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002169
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002170 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
2171 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002172 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002173 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002174
Sanjay Patel9e23fed2016-03-17 15:30:52 +00002175 Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
2176 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
2177 Sel->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002178 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002179 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002180
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002181 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
2182 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
2183 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
2184 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00002185 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2186 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002187 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002188 return true;
2189}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002190
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002191/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
2192/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002193/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002194static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002195 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002196 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
2197 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2198 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2199 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
2200 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002201
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002202 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
2203 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
2204 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002205 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002206 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002207 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002208 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002209
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002210 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002211 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
2212 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
2213 // branch into a return.
2214 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
2215 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2216 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002217 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002218 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002219 return true;
2220 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002221
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002222 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
2223 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
2224 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
2225 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002226
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002227 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
2228 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
2229 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
2230 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
2231 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2232 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2233 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002234
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002235 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2236 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
2237 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2238 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2239 // safe.
2240 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2241 if (TCV->canTrap())
2242 return false;
2243 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2244 if (FCV->canTrap())
2245 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002246
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002247 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2248 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2249 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2250 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002251
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002252 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2253 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002254 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002255 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002256 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2257 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2258 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2259 } else {
Sanjay Patelfacf45a2016-04-27 23:14:12 +00002260 TrueValue =
2261 Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002262 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002263 }
2264
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002265 Value *RI =
2266 !TrueValue ? Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002267
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002268 (void)RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002269
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002270 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002271 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002272 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: " << *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002273
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002274 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2275
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002276 return true;
2277}
2278
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002279/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002280/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00002281static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002282 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2283 return false;
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002284 for (Instruction &I : *PB) {
2285 Instruction *PBI = &I;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002286 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2287 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2288 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2289 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2290 return true;
2291 }
2292 }
2293 return false;
2294}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002295
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002296/// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
2297/// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
2298/// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
2299static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2300 uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
2301 uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
2302 uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
2303 uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
2304 bool PredHasWeights =
2305 PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
2306 bool SuccHasWeights =
2307 BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
2308 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
2309 if (!PredHasWeights)
2310 PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
2311 if (!SuccHasWeights)
2312 SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
2313 return true;
2314 } else {
2315 return false;
2316 }
2317}
2318
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002319/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2320/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2321/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002322bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002323 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002324
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002325 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002326 if (BI->isConditional())
2327 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2328 else {
2329 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2330 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
2331 // successor. If such pattern exisits, check for CSE between BB and its
2332 // predecessor.
2333 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2334 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2335 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2336 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2337 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002338 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002339 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002340 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2341 Cond = Curr;
2342 break;
2343 }
2344 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
2345 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
2346 return false;
2347 }
2348 }
2349
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002350 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002351 return false;
2352 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002353
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002354 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2355 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002356 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002357
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002358 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002359 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002360
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002361 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002362 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt))
2363 ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002364
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002365 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002366 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002367
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002368 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2369 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2370 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2371 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2372 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2373 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002374 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != &*I; ++I) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002375 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2376 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2377 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002378 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002379 return false;
2380 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2381 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2382 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2383 return false;
2384 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2385 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2386 // and Cond.
2387 ++NumBonusInsts;
2388 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2389 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2390 return false;
2391 }
2392
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002393 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2394 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2395 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2396 if (CE->canTrap())
2397 return false;
2398 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2399 if (CE->canTrap())
2400 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002401
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002402 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002403 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002404 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002405 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2406 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002407
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002408 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2409 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002410 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002411
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002412 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2413 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2414 // blocks.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002415 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002416 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002417 (BI->isConditional() && !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002418 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2419 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002420 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002421
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002422 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002423 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002424 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002425
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002426 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002427 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002428 Opc = Instruction::Or;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002429 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002430 Opc = Instruction::And;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002431 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) {
2432 Opc = Instruction::And;
2433 InvertPredCond = true;
2434 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) {
2435 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2436 InvertPredCond = true;
2437 } else {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002438 continue;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002439 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002440 } else {
2441 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2442 continue;
2443 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002444
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002445 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002446 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002447
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002448 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2449 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002450 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002451
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002452 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2453 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2454 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2455 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002456 NewCond =
2457 Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002458 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002459
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002460 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002461 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002462 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002463
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002464 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002465 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002466 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2467 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2468 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002469 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002470 // instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002471 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != &*BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002472 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2473 continue;
2474 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2475 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002476 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002477 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002478
2479 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2480 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2481 // only given the branch precondition.
2482 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2483 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002484 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002485
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002486 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2487 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002488 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002489 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002490
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002491 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2492 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002493 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002494 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002495 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002496 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), New);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002497 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002498 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002499
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002500 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002501 Instruction *NewCond = cast<Instruction>(
2502 Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(), New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002503 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2504
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002505 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002506 bool HasWeights =
2507 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2508 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002509 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2510
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002511 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002512 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002513 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2514 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002515 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002516 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002517 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002518 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2519 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2520 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002521 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
2522 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2523 PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002524 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002525 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2526 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2527 }
2528 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002529 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002530 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2531 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002532 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002533 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002534 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight *
2535 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2536 PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2537 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002538 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2539 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002540 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2541 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2542 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002543 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2544 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2545 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2546
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002547 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),
2548 NewWeights.end());
2549 PBI->setMetadata(
2550 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2551 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002552 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002553 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002554 } else {
2555 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2556 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002557 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002558 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002559 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002560 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002561 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2562 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2563 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2564 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002565 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2566 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2567 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(
2568 Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, NotCond, New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002569 if (PBI_C->isOne())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002570 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2571 Instruction::Or, PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002572 } else {
2573 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2574 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2575 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002576 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2577 Instruction::And, PBI->getCondition(), New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002578 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002579 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2580 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2581 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2582 Instruction::Or, NotCond, MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002583 }
2584 }
2585 // Update PHI Node.
2586 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2587 MergedCond);
2588 }
2589 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2590 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2591 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2592 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002593 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002594
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002595 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2596 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2597
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002598 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002599 for (Instruction &I : *BB)
2600 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2601 I.clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002602
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002603 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002604 }
2605 return false;
2606}
2607
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002608// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2609// nullptr.
2610static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2611 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2612 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2613 if (!BB)
2614 continue;
2615 for (auto &I : *BB)
2616 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2617 if (S)
2618 // Multiple stores seen.
2619 return nullptr;
2620 else
2621 S = SI;
2622 }
2623 }
2624 return S;
2625}
2626
2627static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2628 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2629 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2630 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2631 //
2632 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2633 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2634 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2635 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2636 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2637 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2638 // one.
2639 //
2640 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2641 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2642 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2643 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2644 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002645
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002646 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2647 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2648 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2649 if (!AlternativeV)
2650 break;
2651
2652 assert(std::distance(pred_begin(Succ), pred_end(Succ)) == 2);
2653 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2654 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2655 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2656 break;
2657 PHI = nullptr;
2658 }
2659 if (PHI)
2660 return PHI;
2661
James Molloy3d21dcf2015-12-16 14:12:44 +00002662 // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
2663 if (!AlternativeV &&
2664 (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
2665 return V;
2666
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002667 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002668 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2669 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2670 if (PredBB != BB)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002671 PHI->addIncoming(
2672 AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002673 return PHI;
2674}
2675
2676static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2677 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2678 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
2679 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond) {
2680 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2681 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2682 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2683 };
2684
2685 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2686 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2687 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2688 if (!BB)
2689 return true;
2690 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2691 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2692 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002693 unsigned N = 0;
2694 for (auto &I : *BB) {
2695 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2696 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2697 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2698 ++N;
2699 // Free instructions.
2700 else if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) ||
2701 IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
2702 continue;
2703 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002704 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002705 }
2706 return N <= PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002707 };
2708
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002709 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
2710 (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB) || !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2711 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002712 return false;
2713
2714 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2715 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2716 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2717 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2718 // testing.
2719 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2720 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2721 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2722 return false;
2723
2724 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2725 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2726 return false;
2727
2728 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2729 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2730 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2731 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2732 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2733 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2734 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2735 //
2736 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2737 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2738 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2739 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2740 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2741 return false;
2742 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2743 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2744 return false;
2745 if (QTB)
2746 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2747 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2748 return false;
2749 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2750 I != E; ++I)
2751 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2752 return false;
2753
2754 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
2755 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
2756 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2757 ->getCondition();
2758 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2759 ->getCondition();
2760
2761 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
2762 PStore->getParent());
2763 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
2764 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
2765
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002766 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
2767
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002768 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
2769 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
2770
2771 if (InvertPCond)
2772 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
2773 if (InvertQCond)
2774 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
2775 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
2776
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002777 auto *T =
2778 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002779 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
2780 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
2781 AAMDNodes AAMD;
2782 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
2783 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
2784 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
2785
2786 QStore->eraseFromParent();
2787 PStore->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002788
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002789 return true;
2790}
2791
2792static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI) {
2793 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
2794 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
2795 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
2796 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
2797 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
2798 // PBI and QBI.
2799 //
2800 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
2801 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
2802 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
2803 // sequences can be if-converted away.
2804 //
2805 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
2806 //
2807 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
2808 // / \ | \
2809 // PTB PFB | PFB
2810 // \ / | /
2811 // QBI QBI
2812 // / \ | \
2813 // QTB QFB | QFB
2814 // \ / | /
2815 // PostBB PostBB
2816 //
2817 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
2818 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
2819 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002820 //
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002821 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
2822 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
2823 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
2824 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
2825 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
2826
2827 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
2828 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
2829 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
2830 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
2831 InvertPCond = true;
2832 }
2833 if (QFB == PostBB) {
2834 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
2835 InvertQCond = true;
2836 }
2837
2838 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
2839 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
2840 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
2841 PTB = nullptr;
2842 if (QTB == PostBB)
2843 QTB = nullptr;
2844
2845 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
2846 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
2847 // predecessor.
2848 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002849 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002850 };
2851 if (!PostBB ||
2852 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
2853 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
2854 return false;
2855 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
2856 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
2857 return false;
2858 if (PostBB->getNumUses() != 2 || QBI->getParent()->getNumUses() != 2)
2859 return false;
2860
2861 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
2862 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002863 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002864 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
2865 if (!BB)
2866 continue;
2867 for (auto &I : *BB)
2868 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
2869 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
2870 }
2871 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
2872 if (!BB)
2873 continue;
2874 for (auto &I : *BB)
2875 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
2876 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
2877 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002878
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002879 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
2880 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
2881 // clear what it contains.
2882 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
2883
2884 bool Changed = false;
2885 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
2886 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
2887 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond);
2888 return Changed;
2889}
2890
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002891/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
2892/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002893/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
2894/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00002895static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2896 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002897 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
2898 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00002899
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002900 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002901 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002902 // this conditional branch redundant.
2903 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2904 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2905 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
2906 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
2907 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
2908 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
2909 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002910 BI->setCondition(
2911 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
2912 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002913 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002914
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002915 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
2916 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
2917 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
2918 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002919 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002920 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
2921 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
2922 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00002923 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
2924 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
2925 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002926 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002927 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002928 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && PBI != BI &&
2929 PBI->isConditional() && PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002930 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2931 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002932 NewPN->addIncoming(
2933 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue),
2934 P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002935 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002936 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002937 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002938 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002939
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002940 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002941 return true;
2942 }
2943 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002944
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00002945 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
2946 if (CE->canTrap())
2947 return false;
2948
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002949 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
2950 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
2951 // merged store at the end.
2952 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
2953 return true;
2954
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002955 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002956 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002957 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00002958 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
2959 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2960 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2961 ++BBI;
2962 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002963 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00002964
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002965 int PBIOp, BIOp;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002966 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
2967 PBIOp = 0;
2968 BIOp = 0;
2969 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2970 PBIOp = 0;
2971 BIOp = 1;
2972 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
2973 PBIOp = 1;
2974 BIOp = 0;
2975 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2976 PBIOp = 1;
2977 BIOp = 1;
2978 } else {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002979 return false;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002980 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002981
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002982 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
2983 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
2984 // keep getting unwound.
2985 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
2986 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002987
2988 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002989 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
2990 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002991
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002992 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
2993 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
2994 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
2995
2996 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002997 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002998 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
2999 ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003000 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
3001 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003002
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003003 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
3004 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3005 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
3006 if (CE->canTrap())
3007 return false;
3008
3009 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3010 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3011 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
3012 if (CE->canTrap())
3013 return false;
3014 }
3015
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003016 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003017 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003018
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003019 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00003020 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003021
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003022 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
3023 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
3024 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
3025 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
3026 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
3027 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
3028 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
3029 if (OtherDest == BB) {
3030 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
3031 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003032 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
3033 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003034 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
3035 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003036 }
3037
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003038 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003039
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003040 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
3041 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003042
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003043 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
3044 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00003045 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003046 if (PBIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003047 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003048
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003049 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
3050 if (BIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003051 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003052
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003053 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003054 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003055
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003056 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
3057 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
3058 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
3059 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003060
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003061 // Update branch weight for PBI.
3062 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003063 uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003064 bool HasWeights =
3065 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
3066 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003067 if (HasWeights) {
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003068 PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3069 PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3070 SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3071 SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003072 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
3073 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
3074 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00003075 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
3076 PredOther * SuccCommon,
3077 PredOther * SuccOther};
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003078 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003079 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3080
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003081 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003082 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
3083 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003084 }
3085
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003086 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
3087 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003088 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003089
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003090 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
3091 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
3092 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
3093 // them agree.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003094 PHINode *PN;
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003095 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
3096 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) {
3097 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3098 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3099 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3100 if (BIV != PBIV) {
3101 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003102 SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
3103 Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003104 PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003105 // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
3106 // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
3107 // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
3108 // the outgoing edges of PBI.
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003109 if (HasWeights) {
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003110 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3111 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3112 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3113 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
3114 // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
3115 // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
3116 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
3117 PredOther * SuccCommon};
3118
3119 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3120
3121 NV->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3122 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
3123 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
3124 }
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003125 }
3126 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003127
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003128 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
3129 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003130
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003131 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
3132 // one fewer predecessor.
3133 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003134}
3135
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003136// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
3137// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003138// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
3139// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
3140// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
3141static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003142 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
3143 uint32_t TrueWeight,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003144 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003145 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
3146 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
3147 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
3148 // successor.
3149 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003150 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003151
3152 // Then remove the rest.
Pete Cooperebcd7482015-08-06 20:22:46 +00003153 for (BasicBlock *Succ : OldTerm->successors()) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003154 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
3155 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003156 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003157 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003158 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003159 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00003160 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
3161 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003162 }
3163
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003164 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
3165 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
3166
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003167 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003168 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003169 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
3170 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
3171 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003172 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003173 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003174 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
3175 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003176 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
3177 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
3178 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003179 MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext())
3180 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003181 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003182 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
3183 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
3184 // terminator must be unreachable.
3185 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
3186 } else {
3187 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
3188 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
3189 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003190 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003191 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003192 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003193 else
3194 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003195 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003196 }
3197
3198 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
3199 return true;
3200}
3201
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003202// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003203// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
3204// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
3205// unconditional otherwise.
3206static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
3207 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
3208 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
3209 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
3210 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
3211 return false;
3212
3213 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
3214 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003215 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getCaseSuccessor();
3216 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003217
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003218 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
3219 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
3220 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3221 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3222 if (HasWeights) {
3223 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3224 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003225 TrueWeight =
3226 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getSuccessorIndex()];
3227 FalseWeight =
3228 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getSuccessorIndex()];
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003229 }
3230 }
3231
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003232 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003233 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
3234 FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003235}
3236
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003237// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003238// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
3239// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
3240// with
3241// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
3242static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
3243 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
3244 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
3245 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
3246 if (!TBA || !FBA)
3247 return false;
3248
3249 // Extract the actual blocks.
3250 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
3251 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
3252
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003253 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003254 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
3255 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003256}
3257
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003258/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3259/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003260/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3261/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3262/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3263/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3264/// like:
3265///
3266/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3267/// DEFAULT:
3268/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3269/// br label %end
3270/// end:
3271/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003272///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003273/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3274/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003275static bool TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003276 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
3277 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold,
3278 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003279 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003280
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003281 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3282 // complex.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003283 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
3284 return false;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003285
3286 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3287 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003288
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003289 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3290 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3291 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3292 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003293 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
3294 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003295
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003296 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3297 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3298 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003299
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003300 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3301 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3302 // away.
3303 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3304 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3305 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3306 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003307
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003308 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003309 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003310 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3311 }
3312 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003313 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003314 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003315
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003316 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3317 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3318 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003319 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003320 Value *V;
3321 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3322 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3323 else
3324 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003325
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003326 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3327 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3328 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003329 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003330 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003331
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003332 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3333 // the block.
3334 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003335 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003336 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003337 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3338 return false;
3339
3340 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3341 // true in the PHI.
3342 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003343 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003344
3345 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3346 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3347
3348 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3349 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3350 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3351 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3352
3353 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3354 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003355 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3356 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003357 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3358 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3359 if (HasWeights) {
3360 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3361 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3362 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003363 Weights[0] = (Weights[0] + 1) >> 1;
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003364 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3365
3366 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003367 SI->setMetadata(
3368 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3369 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003370 }
3371 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003372 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003373
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003374 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003375 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3376 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3377 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003378 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3379 return true;
3380}
3381
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003382/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003383/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3384/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003385static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3386 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003387 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003388 if (!Cond)
3389 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003390
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003391 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3392 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3393 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003394
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003395 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003396 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3397 // Unpack the result
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003398 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003399 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3400 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3401 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003402
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003403 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003404 if (!CompVal)
3405 return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003406
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003407 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3408 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3409 return false;
3410
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003411 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3412
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003413 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3414 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3415 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3416 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003417
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003418 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003419 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003420 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
3421 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003422
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003423 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3424 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3425
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003426 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3427 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003428 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3429 if (!TrueWhenEqual)
3430 std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003431
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003432 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003433
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003434 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003435 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n"
3436 << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003437
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003438 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3439 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3440 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3441 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003442 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3443 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003444 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
3445 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003446 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3447
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003448 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003449 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003450 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003451 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003452
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003453 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003454
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003455 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3456 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003457 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003458
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003459 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003460 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003461 BB = NewBB;
3462 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003463
3464 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003465 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3466 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003467 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3468 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003469 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003470
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003471 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003472 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003473
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003474 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3475 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3476 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003477
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003478 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3479 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3480 // the number of edges added.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003481 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003482 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3483 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003484 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003485 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3486 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003487
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003488 // Erase the old branch instruction.
3489 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003490
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003491 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003492 return true;
3493}
3494
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003495bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003496 if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
3497 return SimplifyCommonResume(RI);
3498 else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
3499 RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
3500 // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
3501 return SimplifySingleResume(RI);
Chen Li509ff212016-01-11 19:20:53 +00003502
3503 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003504}
3505
3506// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
3507bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
3508 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3509
3510 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics
3511 // between the phi of landing pads (RI->getValue()) and resume instruction.
3512 BasicBlock::iterator I = cast<Instruction>(RI->getValue())->getIterator(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003513 E = RI->getIterator();
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003514 while (++I != E)
3515 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3516 return false;
3517
3518 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
3519 auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
3520
3521 // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003522 for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
3523 Idx++) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003524 auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
3525 auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3526
3527 // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
3528 // it has other dependents.
3529 if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
3530 continue;
3531
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003532 auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003533 // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
3534 if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
3535 continue;
3536
3537 bool isTrivial = true;
3538
3539 I = IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
3540 E = IncomingBB->getTerminator()->getIterator();
3541 while (++I != E)
3542 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3543 isTrivial = false;
3544 break;
3545 }
3546
3547 if (isTrivial)
3548 TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
3549 }
3550
3551 // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003552 if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
3553 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003554
3555 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
3556 for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
3557 // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
3558 // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
3559 // to remove them all.
3560 while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
3561 BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
3562
3563 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(TrivialBB), PE = pred_end(TrivialBB);
3564 PI != PE;) {
3565 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3566 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
3567 }
3568
3569 // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
3570 // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
3571 // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
3572 // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
3573 // predecessors.
3574 TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3575 new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
3576 }
3577
3578 // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
3579 if (pred_empty(BB))
3580 BB->eraseFromParent();
3581
3582 return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
3583}
3584
3585// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
3586bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003587 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3588 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003589 assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
3590 "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003591
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003592 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3593 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003594 while (++I != E)
3595 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3596 return false;
3597
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003598 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003599 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3600 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3601 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003602 }
3603
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003604 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3605 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003606 if (LoopHeaders)
3607 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003608 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003609}
3610
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003611static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003612 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3613 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3614 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3615 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3616 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3617 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3618 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3619 // simplified.
3620 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003621 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3622 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003623 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3624 return false;
3625
David Majnemer2482e1c2016-06-04 23:50:03 +00003626 // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses. This typically arises
3627 // from unreachable basic blocks.
3628 if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
3629 return false;
3630
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003631 // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003632 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003633 while (++I != E) {
3634 auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I);
3635 if (!II)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003636 return false;
3637
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003638 Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
3639 switch (IntrinsicID) {
3640 case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
3641 case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
3642 case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
3643 break;
3644 default:
3645 return false;
3646 }
3647 }
3648
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003649 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3650 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003651 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003652 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003653
3654 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3655 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3656 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3657 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3658 // are both EH pads).
3659 if (UnwindDest) {
3660 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3661 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003662 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003663 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003664 I != IE; ++I) {
3665 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003666
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003667 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003668 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003669 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003670 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3671 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3672 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3673 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3674 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3675 // pad being removed.
3676 //
3677 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3678 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3679 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3680 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3681 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3682 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3683
3684 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3685 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3686
3687 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3688 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3689 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3690 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003691 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003692 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003693 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3694 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3695 }
3696 } else {
3697 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3698 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3699 // predecessors with this value.
3700 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3701 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3702 }
3703 }
3704 }
3705
3706 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003707 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003708 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3709 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003710 I != IE;) {
3711 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3712 // being moved to another block.
3713 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3714 if (PN->use_empty())
3715 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3716 // when we erase BB below.
3717 continue;
3718
3719 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3720 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3721 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3722 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3723 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3724 if (pred != BB)
3725 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3726 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3727 }
3728 }
3729
3730 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3731 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3732 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003733 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003734 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003735 } else {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003736 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003737 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003738 }
3739 }
3740
3741 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3742 BB->eraseFromParent();
3743 return true;
3744}
3745
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003746// Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
3747static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
3748 // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
3749 // with.
3750 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
3751 if (!UnwindDest)
3752 return false;
3753
3754 // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
3755 // be safe to merge without code duplication.
3756 if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
3757 return false;
3758
3759 // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
3760 auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
3761 if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
3762 return false;
3763
3764 CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
3765 // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
3766 // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
3767 // funclet bundle operands.
3768 SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
3769 // Remove the old cleanuppad.
3770 SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
3771 // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
3772 // destination.
3773 BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
3774 RI->eraseFromParent();
3775
3776 return true;
3777}
3778
3779bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00003780 // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
3781 // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
3782 // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
3783 if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
3784 return false;
3785
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003786 if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003787 return true;
3788
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003789 if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003790 return true;
3791
3792 return false;
3793}
3794
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003795bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003796 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003797 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
3798 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003799
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003800 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003801 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
3802 SmallVector<BranchInst *, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00003803 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
3804 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003805 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
3806 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
3807 if (BI->isUnconditional())
3808 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
3809 else
3810 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
3811 }
3812 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003813
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003814 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00003815 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003816 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
3817 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
3818 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003819 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00003820 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003821 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003822
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003823 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00003824 if (pred_empty(BB)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003825 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3826 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003827 if (LoopHeaders)
3828 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00003829 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003830
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003831 return true;
3832 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003833
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003834 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
3835 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
3836 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
3837 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
3838 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003839
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003840 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
3841 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
3842 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003843 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003844 return true;
3845 }
3846 return false;
3847}
3848
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003849bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
3850 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003851
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003852 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003853
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003854 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
3855 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003856 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
3857 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003858 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003859 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
3860 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
3861 // operations may have this effect.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003862 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
3863 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003864
3865 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003866 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003867 if (SI->isVolatile())
3868 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003869 } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003870 if (LI->isVolatile())
3871 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003872 } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003873 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
3874 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003875 } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003876 if (CXI->isVolatile())
3877 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003878 } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
3879 // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
3880 // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
3881 // default.
3882 // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
3883 if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
3884 EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
3885 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003886 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
3887 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003888 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003889 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00003890 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
3891 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
3892 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
3893 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003894 }
3895
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00003896 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
3897 if (!BBI->use_empty())
3898 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003899 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003900 Changed = true;
3901 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003902
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003903 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
3904 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003905 if (&BB->front() != UI)
3906 return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003907
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003908 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003909 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
3910 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003911 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003912 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003913 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
3914 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
3915 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3916 TI->eraseFromParent();
3917 Changed = true;
3918 }
3919 } else {
3920 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003921 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003922 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3923 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003924 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003925 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3926 Changed = true;
3927 }
3928 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003929 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003930 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;
3931 ++i)
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003932 if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003933 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
3934 SI->removeCase(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003935 --i;
3936 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003937 Changed = true;
3938 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003939 } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
3940 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
3941 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
3942 Changed = true;
3943 }
3944 } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
3945 if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
3946 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
3947 Changed = true;
3948 continue;
3949 }
3950
3951 for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
3952 E = CSI->handler_end();
3953 I != E; ++I) {
3954 if (*I == BB) {
3955 CSI->removeHandler(I);
3956 --I;
3957 --E;
3958 Changed = true;
3959 }
3960 }
3961 if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
3962 BasicBlock *CatchSwitchBB = CSI->getParent();
3963 if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
3964 // Redirect preds to the unwind dest
3965 CatchSwitchBB->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
3966 } else {
3967 // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
3968 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(CatchSwitchBB));
3969 for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
3970 removeUnwindEdge(EHPred);
3971 }
3972 // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
3973 new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
3974 CSI->eraseFromParent();
3975 Changed = true;
3976 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003977 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003978 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3979 TI->eraseFromParent();
3980 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003981 }
3982 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003983
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003984 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003985 if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003986 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3987 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003988 if (LoopHeaders)
3989 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003990 return true;
3991 }
3992
3993 return Changed;
3994}
3995
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003996static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
3997 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
3998
3999 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
4000 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4001 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
4002 return false;
4003 }
4004 return true;
4005}
4006
4007/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
4008/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004009static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004010 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004011
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004012 bool HasDefault =
4013 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004014
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004015 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
4016 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
4017 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004018 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
4019 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004020
4021 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I : SI->cases()) {
4022 BasicBlock *Dest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004023 if (!DestA)
4024 DestA = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004025 if (Dest == DestA) {
4026 CasesA.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
4027 continue;
4028 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004029 if (!DestB)
4030 DestB = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004031 if (Dest == DestB) {
4032 CasesB.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
4033 continue;
4034 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004035 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004036 }
4037
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004038 assert(DestA && DestB &&
4039 "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004040 assert(DestA != DestB);
4041 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
4042 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
4043 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
4044
4045 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
4046 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
4047 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
4048 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
4049 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
4050 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
4051 ContiguousDest = DestA;
4052 OtherDest = DestB;
4053 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
4054 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
4055 ContiguousDest = DestB;
4056 OtherDest = DestA;
4057 } else
4058 return false;
4059
4060 // Start building the compare and branch.
4061
4062 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004063 Constant *NumCases =
4064 ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004065
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00004066 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
4067 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004068 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
4069
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004070 Value *Cmp;
4071 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004072 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004073 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
4074 else
4075 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004076 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004077
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004078 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004079 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
4080 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004081 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4082 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004083 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
4084 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
4085 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4086 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
4087 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
4088 else
4089 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
4090 }
4091 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
4092 TrueWeight /= 2;
4093 FalseWeight /= 2;
4094 }
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004095 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004096 MDBuilder(SI->getContext())
4097 .createBranchWeights((uint32_t)TrueWeight,
4098 (uint32_t)FalseWeight));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004099 }
4100 }
4101
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004102 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
4103 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4104 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004105 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4106 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004107 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004108 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4109 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004110 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4111 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004112 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4113 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004114 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
4115 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4116 }
4117
4118 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004119 SI->eraseFromParent();
4120
4121 return true;
4122}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004123
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004124/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004125/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004126static bool EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
4127 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004128 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00004129 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004130 APInt KnownZero(Bits, 0), KnownOne(Bits, 0);
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004131 computeKnownBits(Cond, KnownZero, KnownOne, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004132
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004133 // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
4134 // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
4135 // bits are in the condition value.
4136 unsigned ExtraSignBits = ComputeNumSignBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI) - 1;
4137 unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond = Bits - ExtraSignBits;
4138
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004139 // Gather dead cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004140 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004141 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004142 APInt CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
4143 if ((CaseVal & KnownZero) != 0 || (CaseVal & KnownOne) != KnownOne ||
4144 (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004145 DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004146 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal << " is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004147 }
4148 }
4149
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004150 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
4151 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004152 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
4153 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004154 bool HasDefault =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004155 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4156 const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
4157 Bits - (KnownZero.Or(KnownOne)).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00004158 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004159 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004160 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004161 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004162 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004163 BasicBlock *NewDefault =
4164 SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(), SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004165 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
4166 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004167 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
4168 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
4169 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTI);
4170 return true;
4171 }
4172
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004173 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
4174 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
4175 if (HasWeight) {
4176 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4177 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
4178 }
4179
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004180 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004181 for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
4182 SwitchInst::CaseIt Case = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00004183 assert(Case != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004184 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004185 if (HasWeight) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004186 std::swap(Weights[Case.getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004187 Weights.pop_back();
4188 }
4189
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004190 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004191 Case.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004192 SI->removeCase(Case);
4193 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00004194 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004195 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
4196 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004197 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
4198 .createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004199 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004200
4201 return !DeadCases.empty();
4202}
4203
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004204/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
4205/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004206/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
4207/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
4208/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
4209static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004210 BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004211 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004212 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004213 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004214 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004215
4216 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
4217 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004218 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004219
4220 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
4221
4222 BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
4223 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4224 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
4225 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
4226
4227 Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004228 if (InValue != CaseValue)
4229 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004230
4231 *PhiIndex = Idx;
4232 return PHI;
4233 }
4234
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004235 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004236}
4237
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004238/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
4239/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
4240/// blocks of the switch can be folded away.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004241/// Returns true if a change is made.
4242static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004243 typedef DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>> ForwardingNodesMap;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004244 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
4245
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004246 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E;
4247 ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004248 ConstantInt *CaseValue = I.getCaseValue();
4249 BasicBlock *CaseDest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004250
4251 int PhiIndex;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004252 PHINode *PHI =
4253 FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIndex);
4254 if (!PHI)
4255 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004256
4257 ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex);
4258 }
4259
4260 bool Changed = false;
4261
4262 for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004263 E = ForwardingNodes.end();
4264 I != E; ++I) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004265 PHINode *Phi = I->first;
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004266 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004267
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004268 if (Indexes.size() < 2)
4269 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004270
4271 for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I)
4272 Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition());
4273 Changed = true;
4274 }
4275
4276 return Changed;
4277}
4278
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004279/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004280/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Hans Wennborg08238ad2012-09-07 08:22:57 +00004281static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00004282 if (C->isThreadDependent())
4283 return false;
4284 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
4285 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004286
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00004287 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C))
4288 return CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing();
4289
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004290 return isa<ConstantFP>(C) || isa<ConstantInt>(C) ||
4291 isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) || isa<GlobalValue>(C) ||
4292 isa<UndefValue>(C);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004293}
4294
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004295/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004296/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004297static Constant *
4298LookupConstant(Value *V,
4299 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004300 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
4301 return C;
4302 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
4303}
4304
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004305/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004306/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
4307/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004308/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004309static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004310ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
4311 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004312 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004313 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
4314 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004315 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004316 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
4317 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
4318 if (A->isNullValue())
4319 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004320 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004321 }
4322
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004323 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
4324 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
4325 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
4326 COps.push_back(A);
4327 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004328 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004329 }
4330
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004331 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004332 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
4333 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004334 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004335
Manuel Jacobe9024592016-01-21 06:33:22 +00004336 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004337}
4338
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004339/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004340/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004341/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004342/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004343static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004344GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004345 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004346 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
4347 const DataLayout &DL) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004348 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
4349 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
4350
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004351 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
4352 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004353 SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004354 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
4355 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
4356 ++I) {
4357 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
4358 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
4359 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1)
4360 return false;
4361 Pred = CaseDest;
4362 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
4363 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
4364 // Skip debug intrinsic.
4365 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004366 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&*I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004367 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004368
4369 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
4370 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
4371 // no longer dominate all its uses.
4372 for (auto &Use : I->uses()) {
4373 User *User = Use.getUser();
4374 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
4375 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
4376 continue;
4377 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
4378 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
4379 continue;
4380 return false;
4381 }
4382
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004383 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&*I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004384 } else {
4385 break;
4386 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004387 }
4388
4389 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
4390 if (!*CommonDest)
4391 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
4392 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
4393 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
4394 return false;
4395
4396 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
4397 BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin();
4398 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4399 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
4400 if (Idx == -1)
4401 continue;
4402
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004403 Constant *ConstVal =
4404 LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004405 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004406 return false;
4407
4408 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
4409 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal))
4410 return false;
4411
4412 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal));
4413 }
4414
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004415 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004416}
4417
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004418// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
4419// Result.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004420static void MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004421 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4422 Constant *Result) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004423 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
4424 if (I.first == Result) {
4425 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
4426 return;
4427 }
4428 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004429 UniqueResults.push_back(
4430 std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004431}
4432
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004433// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004434// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
4435// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
4436// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004437static bool InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI,
4438 BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
4439 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4440 Constant *&DefaultResult,
4441 const DataLayout &DL) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004442 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
4443 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
4444
4445 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4446 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
4447 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
4448 DL))
4449 return false;
4450
4451 // Only one value per case is permitted
4452 if (Results.size() > 1)
4453 return false;
4454 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
4455
4456 // Check the PHI consistency.
4457 if (!PHI)
4458 PHI = Results[0].first;
4459 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
4460 return false;
4461 }
4462 // Find the default result value.
4463 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
4464 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
4465 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
4466 DL);
4467 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
4468 // is unreachable.
4469 DefaultResult =
4470 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
4471 if ((!DefaultResult &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004472 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004473 return false;
4474
4475 return true;
4476}
4477
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004478// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4479// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004480// Example:
4481// switch (a) {
4482// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4483// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4484// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4485// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4486// default:
4487// return 4;
4488// }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004489static Value *ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4490 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4491 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004492 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004493 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004494 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4495 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4496 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4497 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4498 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4499 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4500
4501 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4502 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4503 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4504 Value *const ValueCompare =
4505 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4506 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4507 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4508 }
4509 Value *const ValueCompare =
4510 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004511 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
4512 SelectValue, "switch.select");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004513 }
4514
4515 return nullptr;
4516}
4517
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004518// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4519// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004520static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4521 Value *SelectValue,
4522 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4523 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4524 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4525 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4526 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4527
4528 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4529
4530 // Remove the switch.
4531 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4532 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4533
4534 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4535 continue;
4536 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4537 }
4538 SI->eraseFromParent();
4539}
4540
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004541/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004542/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4543/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
4544static bool SwitchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004545 AssumptionCache *AC, const DataLayout &DL) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004546 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4547 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4548 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4549 Constant *DefaultResult;
4550 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4551 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004552 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
4553 DL))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004554 return false;
4555 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4556 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4557 return false;
4558 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4559
4560 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004561 Value *SelectValue =
4562 ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004563 if (SelectValue) {
4564 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4565 return true;
4566 }
4567 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4568 return false;
4569}
4570
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004571namespace {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004572/// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
4573class SwitchLookupTable {
4574public:
4575 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4576 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
4577 SwitchLookupTable(
4578 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4579 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4580 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004581
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004582 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
4583 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
4584 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004585
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004586 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
4587 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
4588 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
4589 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004590
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004591private:
4592 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4593 // different ways.
4594 enum {
4595 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4596 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4597 SingleValueKind,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004598
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004599 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4600 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4601 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4602 LinearMapKind,
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004603
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004604 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4605 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4606 // shift and mask operations.
4607 BitMapKind,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004608
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004609 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4610 // instructions from the table.
4611 ArrayKind
4612 } Kind;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004613
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004614 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
4615 Constant *SingleValue;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004616
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004617 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
4618 ConstantInt *BitMap;
4619 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004620
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004621 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
4622 ConstantInt *LinearOffset;
4623 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004624
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004625 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
4626 GlobalVariable *Array;
4627};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +00004628}
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004629
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004630SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4631 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4632 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4633 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004634 : SingleValue(nullptr), BitMap(nullptr), BitMapElementTy(nullptr),
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004635 LinearOffset(nullptr), LinearMultiplier(nullptr), Array(nullptr) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004636 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4637 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004638
4639 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004640 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004641
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004642 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4643
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004644 // Build up the table contents.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004645 SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004646 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4647 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4648 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004649 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004650
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004651 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004652 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4653
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004654 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004655 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004656 }
4657
4658 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004659 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004660 assert(DefaultValue &&
4661 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004662 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004663 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4664 if (!TableContents[I])
4665 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004666 }
4667
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004668 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004669 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004670 }
4671
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004672 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4673 // that single value.
4674 if (SingleValue) {
4675 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4676 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004677 }
4678
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004679 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4680 // table index.
4681 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4682 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4683 APInt PrevVal;
4684 APInt DistToPrev;
4685 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4686 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4687 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4688 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4689 if (!ConstVal) {
4690 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4691 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4692 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4693 break;
4694 }
4695 APInt Val = ConstVal->getValue();
4696 if (I != 0) {
4697 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4698 if (I == 1) {
4699 DistToPrev = Dist;
4700 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
4701 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4702 break;
4703 }
4704 }
4705 PrevVal = Val;
4706 }
4707 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
4708 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
4709 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
4710 Kind = LinearMapKind;
4711 ++NumLinearMaps;
4712 return;
4713 }
4714 }
4715
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004716 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004717 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004718 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004719 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
4720 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
4721 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00004722 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
4723 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
4724 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
4725 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
4726 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004727 }
4728 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
4729 BitMapElementTy = IT;
4730 Kind = BitMapKind;
4731 ++NumBitMaps;
4732 return;
4733 }
4734
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004735 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004736 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004737 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
4738
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004739 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/true,
4740 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004741 "switch.table");
Peter Collingbourne96efdd62016-06-14 21:01:22 +00004742 Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004743 Kind = ArrayKind;
4744}
4745
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004746Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004747 switch (Kind) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004748 case SingleValueKind:
4749 return SingleValue;
4750 case LinearMapKind: {
4751 // Derive the result value from the input value.
4752 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
4753 false, "switch.idx.cast");
4754 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
4755 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
4756 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
4757 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
4758 return Result;
4759 }
4760 case BitMapKind: {
4761 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
4762 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004763
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004764 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
4765 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
4766 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
4767 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004768
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004769 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
4770 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
4771 ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
4772 "switch.shiftamt");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004773
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004774 // Shift down.
4775 Value *DownShifted =
4776 Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
4777 // Mask off.
4778 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
4779 }
4780 case ArrayKind: {
4781 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
4782 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
4783 uint64_t TableSize =
4784 Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
4785 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
4786 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
4787 Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
4788 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00004789
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004790 Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
4791 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
4792 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
4793 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
4794 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004795 }
4796 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
4797}
4798
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004799bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004800 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00004801 Type *ElementType) {
4802 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004803 if (!IT)
4804 return false;
4805 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
4806 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00004807
4808 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004809 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00004810 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004811 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004812}
4813
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004814/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
4815/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004816static bool
4817ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
4818 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
4819 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004820 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
4821 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004822
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00004823 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004824 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004825 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
4826 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004827
4828 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004829 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004830
4831 // Saturate this flag to false.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004832 AllTablesFitInRegister =
4833 AllTablesFitInRegister &&
4834 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004835
4836 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
4837 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
4838 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
4839 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004840 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004841 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004842
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00004843 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
4844 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
4845 return true;
4846
4847 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
4848 if (HasIllegalType)
4849 return false;
4850
4851 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
4852 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
4853 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
4854 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004855}
4856
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004857/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
4858/// \code
4859/// if (idx < tablesize)
4860/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
4861/// else
4862/// r = default_value;
4863/// if (r != default_value)
4864/// ...
4865/// \endcode
4866/// Is optimized to:
4867/// \code
4868/// cond = idx < tablesize;
4869/// if (cond)
4870/// r = table[idx];
4871/// else
4872/// r = default_value;
4873/// if (cond)
4874/// ...
4875/// \endcode
4876/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004877static void reuseTableCompare(
4878 User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
4879 Constant *DefaultValue,
4880 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004881
4882 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
4883 if (!CmpInst)
4884 return;
4885
4886 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
4887 // threading can do its work afterwards.
4888 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
4889 return;
4890
4891 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
4892 if (!CmpOp1)
4893 return;
4894
4895 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
4896 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
4897 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
4898
4899 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
4900 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
4901 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
4902 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
4903 return;
4904
4905 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
4906 // compare result.
4907 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
4908 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004909 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004910 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst)
4911 return;
4912 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
4913 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
4914 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004915
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004916 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
4917 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
4918 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
4919 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
4920 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
4921 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
4922 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
4923 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
4924 return;
4925 }
4926
4927 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
4928 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
4929 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
4930 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4931 } else {
4932 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004933 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
4934 RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
4935 RangeCheckBranch);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004936 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
4937 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4938 }
4939}
4940
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004941/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
4942/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
4943/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004944static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
4945 const DataLayout &DL,
4946 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004947 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004948
Hans Wennborgc3c8d952012-11-07 21:35:12 +00004949 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004950 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables())
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004951 return false;
4952
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004953 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
4954 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
4955
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004956 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
4957 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
4958 // string and lookup indices into that.
4959
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004960 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
4961 // them
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00004962 // faster, so we don't analyze them.
4963 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004964 return false;
4965
4966 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00004967 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004968 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
4969 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
4970 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4971 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4972
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004973 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004974 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4> ResultListTy;
4975 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
4976 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
4977 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
4978 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004979
4980 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
4981 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4982 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
4983 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
4984 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
4985 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
4986
4987 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004988 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> ResultsTy;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004989 ResultsTy Results;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004990 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004991 Results, DL))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004992 return false;
4993
4994 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004995 for (const auto &I : Results) {
4996 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
4997 Constant *Value = I.second;
4998 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
4999 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
5000 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005001 }
5002 }
5003
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005004 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005005 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005006 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
5007 }
5008
5009 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
5010 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
5011 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
5012 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
5013
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005014 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
5015 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005016 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005017 bool HasDefaultResults = GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(),
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005018 &CommonDest, DefaultResultsList, DL);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005019
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005020 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
5021 if (NeedMask) {
5022 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005023 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005024 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005025 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005026 return false;
5027 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005028
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005029 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
5030 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5031 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00005032 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005033 }
5034
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005035 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005036 return false;
5037
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005038 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005039 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005040 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
5041 Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005042
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005043 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005044 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005045 Value *TableIndex =
5046 Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal, "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005047
5048 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
5049 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005050 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005051 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005052 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
5053 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
5054 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
5055
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005056 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
5057 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
5058 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
5059 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
5060 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
5061 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005062 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
5063
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005064 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005065 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005066 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
5067 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005068 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005069 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
5070 TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
5071 RangeCheckBranch =
5072 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005073 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005074
5075 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
5076 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005077
5078 if (NeedMask) {
5079 // Before doing the lookup we do the hole check.
5080 // The LookupBB is therefore re-purposed to do the hole check
5081 // and we create a new LookupBB.
5082 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
5083 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005084 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
5085 CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005086
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00005087 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
5088 // unnecessary illegal types.
5089 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
5090 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
5091 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005092 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005093 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
5094 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005095 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
5096 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005097 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
5098 }
5099 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
5100
5101 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
5102 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
5103 // else continue with table lookup.
5104 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005105 Value *MaskIndex =
5106 Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
5107 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
5108 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
5109 Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005110 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
5111
5112 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
5113 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
5114 }
5115
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005116 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
5117 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs, to avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
5118 // do not delete PHINodes here.
5119 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
5120 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
5121 }
5122
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005123 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005124 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
5125 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005126 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005127
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005128 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
5129 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005130 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005131
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005132 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005133
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005134 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
5135 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005136 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
5137 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005138 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
5139 ReturnedEarly = true;
5140 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005141 }
5142
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005143 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
5144 // possible.
5145 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
5146 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
5147 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
5148 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
5149 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
5150 }
5151 }
5152
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005153 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005154 }
5155
5156 if (!ReturnedEarly)
5157 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
5158
5159 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005160 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005161 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005162
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005163 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005164 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005165 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
5166 }
5167 SI->eraseFromParent();
5168
5169 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005170 if (NeedMask)
5171 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005172 return true;
5173}
5174
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005175static bool isSwitchDense(ArrayRef<int64_t> Values) {
5176 // See also SelectionDAGBuilder::isDense(), which this function was based on.
5177 uint64_t Diff = (uint64_t)Values.back() - (uint64_t)Values.front();
5178 uint64_t Range = Diff + 1;
5179 uint64_t NumCases = Values.size();
5180 // 40% is the default density for building a jump table in optsize/minsize mode.
5181 uint64_t MinDensity = 40;
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005182
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005183 return NumCases * 100 >= Range * MinDensity;
5184}
5185
5186// Try and transform a switch that has "holes" in it to a contiguous sequence
5187// of cases.
5188//
5189// A switch such as: switch(i) {case 5: case 9: case 13: case 17:} can be
5190// range-reduced to: switch ((i-5) / 4) {case 0: case 1: case 2: case 3:}.
5191//
5192// This converts a sparse switch into a dense switch which allows better
5193// lowering and could also allow transforming into a lookup table.
5194static bool ReduceSwitchRange(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5195 const DataLayout &DL,
5196 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5197 auto *CondTy = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5198 if (CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth() > 64 ||
5199 !DL.fitsInLegalInteger(CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth()))
5200 return false;
5201 // Only bother with this optimization if there are more than 3 switch cases;
5202 // SDAG will only bother creating jump tables for 4 or more cases.
5203 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4)
5204 return false;
5205
5206 // This transform is agnostic to the signedness of the input or case values. We
5207 // can treat the case values as signed or unsigned. We can optimize more common
5208 // cases such as a sequence crossing zero {-4,0,4,8} if we interpret case values
5209 // as signed.
5210 SmallVector<int64_t,4> Values;
5211 for (auto &C : SI->cases())
5212 Values.push_back(C.getCaseValue()->getValue().getSExtValue());
5213 std::sort(Values.begin(), Values.end());
5214
5215 // If the switch is already dense, there's nothing useful to do here.
5216 if (isSwitchDense(Values))
5217 return false;
5218
5219 // First, transform the values such that they start at zero and ascend.
5220 int64_t Base = Values[0];
5221 for (auto &V : Values)
5222 V -= Base;
5223
5224 // Now we have signed numbers that have been shifted so that, given enough
5225 // precision, there are no negative values. Since the rest of the transform
5226 // is bitwise only, we switch now to an unsigned representation.
5227 uint64_t GCD = 0;
5228 for (auto &V : Values)
5229 GCD = llvm::GreatestCommonDivisor64(GCD, (uint64_t)V);
5230
5231 // This transform can be done speculatively because it is so cheap - it results
5232 // in a single rotate operation being inserted. This can only happen if the
5233 // factor extracted is a power of 2.
5234 // FIXME: If the GCD is an odd number we can multiply by the multiplicative
5235 // inverse of GCD and then perform this transform.
5236 // FIXME: It's possible that optimizing a switch on powers of two might also
5237 // be beneficial - flag values are often powers of two and we could use a CLZ
5238 // as the key function.
5239 if (GCD <= 1 || !llvm::isPowerOf2_64(GCD))
5240 // No common divisor found or too expensive to compute key function.
5241 return false;
5242
5243 unsigned Shift = llvm::Log2_64(GCD);
5244 for (auto &V : Values)
5245 V = (int64_t)((uint64_t)V >> Shift);
5246
5247 if (!isSwitchDense(Values))
5248 // Transform didn't create a dense switch.
5249 return false;
5250
5251 // The obvious transform is to shift the switch condition right and emit a
5252 // check that the condition actually cleanly divided by GCD, i.e.
5253 // C & (1 << Shift - 1) == 0
5254 // inserting a new CFG edge to handle the case where it didn't divide cleanly.
5255 //
5256 // A cheaper way of doing this is a simple ROTR(C, Shift). This performs the
5257 // shift and puts the shifted-off bits in the uppermost bits. If any of these
5258 // are nonzero then the switch condition will be very large and will hit the
5259 // default case.
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005260
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005261 auto *Ty = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5262 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
5263 auto *ShiftC = ConstantInt::get(Ty, Shift);
5264 auto *Sub = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Base));
Benjamin Krameraa160c22016-08-05 14:55:02 +00005265 auto *LShr = Builder.CreateLShr(Sub, ShiftC);
5266 auto *Shl = Builder.CreateShl(Sub, Ty->getBitWidth() - Shift);
5267 auto *Rot = Builder.CreateOr(LShr, Shl);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005268 SI->replaceUsesOfWith(SI->getCondition(), Rot);
5269
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005270 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt C = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); C != E;
5271 ++C) {
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005272 auto *Orig = C.getCaseValue();
5273 auto Sub = Orig->getValue() - APInt(Ty->getBitWidth(), Base);
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005274 C.setValue(
5275 cast<ConstantInt>(ConstantInt::get(Ty, Sub.lshr(ShiftC->getValue()))));
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005276 }
5277 return true;
5278}
5279
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005280bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005281 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
5282
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005283 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
5284 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5285 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
5286 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
5287 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005288 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005289
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005290 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5291 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
5292 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005293 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005294
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005295 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
5296 // away into any preds.
5297 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
5298 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5299 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
5300 ++BBI;
5301 if (SI == &*BBI)
5302 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005303 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005304 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00005305
5306 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005307 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005308 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005309
5310 // Remove unreachable cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005311 if (EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, AC, DL))
5312 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005313
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005314 if (SwitchToSelect(SI, Builder, AC, DL))
5315 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00005316
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005317 if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005318 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005319
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005320 if (SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
5321 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005322
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005323 if (ReduceSwitchRange(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
5324 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
5325
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005326 return false;
5327}
5328
5329bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
5330 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
5331 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005332
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005333 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
5334 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
5335 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
5336 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00005337 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005338 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
5339 IBI->removeDestination(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005340 --i;
5341 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005342 Changed = true;
5343 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005344 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005345
5346 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
5347 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
5348 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
5349 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5350 return true;
5351 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005352
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005353 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
5354 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
5355 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
5356 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5357 return true;
5358 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005359
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005360 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
5361 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005362 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005363 }
5364 return Changed;
5365}
5366
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005367/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
5368/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
5369/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
5370/// a shared handler.
5371///
5372/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
5373/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
5374/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
5375/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
5376/// sinking in this file)
5377///
5378/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
5379/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
5380/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
5381/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
5382/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't loose any ability to
5383/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
5384///
5385/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
5386/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
5387/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
5388static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
5389 BasicBlock *BB) {
5390 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
5391 assert(Succ);
5392 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
5393 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
5394 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
5395 return false;
5396
5397 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
5398 if (BB == OtherPred)
5399 continue;
5400 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
5401 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
5402 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
5403 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005404 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5405 }
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005406 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
5407 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
5408 continue;
5409
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00005410 // We've found an identical block. Update our predecessors to take that
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005411 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
5412 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
5413 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
5414 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
5415 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005416 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
5417 "unexpected successor");
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005418 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
5419 }
5420
5421 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
5422 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005423 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end(); I != E;) {
5424 Instruction &Inst = *I;
5425 I++;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005426 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
5427 Inst.eraseFromParent();
5428 }
5429
5430 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
5431 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
5432 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
5433 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
5434 }
5435
5436 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
5437 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5438 BI->eraseFromParent();
5439 return true;
5440 }
5441 return false;
5442}
5443
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005444bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
5445 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005446 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005447
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00005448 if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI))
5449 return true;
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005450
5451 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
5452 // if LoopHeader is provided, check if the block is a loop header
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005453 // (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and vectorization
5454 // to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops.
5455 // These blocks can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later
5456 // in the back-end.)
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005457 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005458 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
Hans Wennborge9134892016-04-11 20:35:01 +00005459 (!LoopHeaders || !LoopHeaders->count(BB)) &&
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005460 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
5461 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005462
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005463 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison
5464 // against a constant, try to simplify the block.
5465 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
5466 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
5467 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5468 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005469 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005470 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI,
5471 BonusInstThreshold, AC))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005472 return true;
5473 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005474
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005475 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
5476 // equivalent.
5477 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005478 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5479 }
5480 if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005481 return true;
5482 }
5483
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00005484 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5485 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
5486 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
5487 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005488 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
5489 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005490 return false;
5491}
5492
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005493static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
5494 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
5495 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
5496 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
5497 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
5498 return nullptr;
5499 PredPred = PPred;
5500 }
5501 return PredPred;
5502}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005503
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005504bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005505 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005506
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005507 // Conditional branch
5508 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
5509 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5510 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
5511 // switch.
5512 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005513 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005514 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005515
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005516 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
5517 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5518 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
5519 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5520 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5521 ++I;
5522 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005523 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005524 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005525 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005526 ++I;
5527 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5528 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5529 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005530 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005531 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005532 }
5533 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005534
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005535 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005536 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005537 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005538
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005539 // If this basic block has a single dominating predecessor block and the
5540 // dominating block's condition implies BI's condition, we know the direction
5541 // of the BI branch.
5542 if (BasicBlock *Dom = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5543 auto *PBI = dyn_cast_or_null<BranchInst>(Dom->getTerminator());
5544 if (PBI && PBI->isConditional() &&
5545 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1) &&
5546 (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB || PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB)) {
5547 bool CondIsFalse = PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB;
5548 Optional<bool> Implication = isImpliedCondition(
5549 PBI->getCondition(), BI->getCondition(), DL, CondIsFalse);
5550 if (Implication) {
5551 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
5552 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
5553 ConstantInt *CI = *Implication
5554 ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
5555 : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
5556 BI->setCondition(CI);
5557 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
5558 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
5559 }
5560 }
5561 }
5562
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00005563 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5564 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
5565 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005566 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
5567 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005568
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005569 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
5570 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
5571 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
5572 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005573 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5574 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005575 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
5576 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005577 } else {
5578 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005579 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005580 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
5581 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5582 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005583 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
5584 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005585 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005586 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005587 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005588 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005589 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
5590 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5591 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005592 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
5593 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005594 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005595
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005596 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
5597 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
5598 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
5599 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005600 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005601 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005602
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005603 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00005604 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
5605 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005606 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00005607 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005608 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005609
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005610 // Look for diamond patterns.
5611 if (MergeCondStores)
5612 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5613 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5614 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
5615 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
5616 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005617
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005618 return false;
5619}
5620
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005621/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5622static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5623 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5624 if (!C)
5625 return false;
5626
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005627 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005628 return false;
5629
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005630 if (C->isNullValue() || isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005631 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005632 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005633
5634 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5635 // control flow (eg. calls)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith0a12729f2016-08-16 23:57:56 +00005636 for (BasicBlock::iterator
5637 i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I),
5638 UI = BasicBlock::iterator(dyn_cast<Instruction>(Use));
5639 i != UI; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005640 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005641 return false;
5642
5643 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5644 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5645 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5646 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5647
5648 // Look through bitcasts.
5649 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5650 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5651
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005652 // Load from null is undefined.
5653 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005654 if (!LI->isVolatile())
5655 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005656
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005657 // Store to null is undefined.
5658 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005659 if (!SI->isVolatile())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005660 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 &&
5661 SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005662
5663 // A call to null is undefined.
5664 if (auto CS = CallSite(Use))
5665 return CS.getCalledValue() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005666 }
5667 return false;
5668}
5669
5670/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005671/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005672static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
5673 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin();
5674 PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i)
5675 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5676 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) {
5677 TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
5678 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5679 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
5680 BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i));
5681 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5682 // destination from conditional branches.
5683 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5684 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5685 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005686 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
5687 : BI->getSuccessor(0));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005688 BI->eraseFromParent();
5689 return true;
5690 }
5691 // TODO: SwitchInst.
5692 }
5693
5694 return false;
5695}
5696
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005697bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00005698 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005699
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005700 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005701 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005702
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005703 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
5704 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005705 if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005706 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00005707 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
5708 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
5709 return true;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005710 }
5711
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005712 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
5713 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00005714 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005715
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00005716 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
5717 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
5718
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005719 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
5720 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
5721
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00005722 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
5723 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
5724 // if there are no PHI nodes.
5725 //
5726 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
5727 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005728
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00005729 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
5730
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005731 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
5732 // eliminate it, do so now.
5733 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
5734 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005735 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005736
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005737 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005738 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005739 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005740 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder))
5741 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005742 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005743 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder))
5744 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005745 }
5746 } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005747 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder))
5748 return true;
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +00005749 } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005750 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder))
5751 return true;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00005752 } else if (CleanupReturnInst *RI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005753 dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5754 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI))
5755 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005756 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005757 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder))
5758 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005759 } else if (UnreachableInst *UI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005760 dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5761 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI))
5762 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005763 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005764 dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5765 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI))
5766 return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00005767 }
5768
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005769 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005770}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005771
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005772/// This function is used to do simplification of a CFG.
5773/// For example, it adjusts branches to branches to eliminate the extra hop,
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005774/// eliminates unreachable basic blocks, and does other "peephole" optimization
5775/// of the CFG. It returns true if a modification was made.
5776///
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005777bool llvm::SimplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005778 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC,
5779 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005780 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005781 BonusInstThreshold, AC, LoopHeaders)
5782 .run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005783}